Viper
OWNER’S MANUAL
2016
2016 Viper
Third Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
16ZD-126-AC
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ..................................91
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................145
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................241
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................313
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................333
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................389
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................397
10
INDEX .....................................................................407
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warn-
ings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside the vehicle through the windshield. This number
also appears on the top surface of the right-hand side
tunnel frame rail near the center of the vehicle, the
outboard facing surface of the right-hand side B-Pillar
frame rail, as well as the Automobile Information Disclo-
sure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............11
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition ..............11
▫ KeyFob.............................12
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message ..........13
▫ General Information ....................15
䡵 SENTRY KEY ..........................15
▫ Replacement Keys .....................16
▫ Customer Key Programming ..............17
▫ General Information ....................17
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM .......18
▫ Rearming Of The System .................18
▫ To Arm The System .....................18
▫ To Disarm The System ...................19
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY ...................20
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ...........21
▫ To Unlock The Doors....................21
▫ To Lock The Doors .....................23
▫ To Unlatch The Liftgate ..................23
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................23
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters .......24
2
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........24
▫ General Information ....................25
䡵 DOOR LOCKS .........................26
▫ Power Door Locks .....................27
䡵 WINDOWS ...........................29
▫ Power Windows .......................29
▫ Auto-Down Feature ....................30
▫ AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection .31
▫ Reset Auto-Up ........................31
䡵 LIFTGATE ............................32
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........34
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............34
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................35
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........47
▫ Child Restraints .......................73
▫ Transporting Pets ......................84
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ....85
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ..........................86
▫ Transporting Passengers..................86
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................87
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................88
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ..........................89
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
ignition feature.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button, as long as the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the
push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
You can keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: In the event that the FOB does not start the
vehicle (⬙FOB not Found⬙ message) use the FOB nose
(furthest point from key ring) and push the start button.
FOB replaces the finger.
— RKE Liftgate Button
— RKE Door Unlock Button
— RKE Door Lock Button
— RKE PANIC Alarm Button
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio and power outlets will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Emergency Key Removal
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmis-
sion into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
engine OFF, remove the key fob from the ignition
and lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition
node is in “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from
the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle, place the
ignition in the OFF position and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Push Button
Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine
to crank with an invalid Key Fob.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the system. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone tried to use an invalid Key Fob
to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in
the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the system.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
NOTE: Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of program-
ming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank
Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System ser-
viced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors, liftgate,
and hood for unauthorized entry and the ignition for
unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm,
the Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from
starting. It will also sound the horn and flash the park
lights, and taillights.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
(flashing lights) after 15 minutes, and then rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is in the ⬙OFF⬙
position.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push the LOCK
button on the interior power
door lock switch with the driver and/or passen-
ger door open.
• Push the LOCK the
button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
Entering The Liftgate With The System Armed
NOTE: Using the key to open the liftgate while the
Vehicle Security Alarm is armed will trigger the alarm.
Push the LIFTGATE
release button on the RKE
transmitter twice to allow access without triggering
the alarm or having to disarm the Vehicle Security
Alarm. Then, within 30 seconds, open the liftgate by
using the key cylinder or the LIFTGATE release switch
located in the exterior liftgate handle.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the UNLOCK
button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position:
• Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button (re-
quires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
NOTE:
• The liftgate key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
Power Door Lock switches will not unlock the doors.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times, and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
Electronic Immobilization System
The Electronic Immobilization system prevents unau-
thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The interior lights will turn on whenever a door is
opened or the liftgate is opened and the dimmer switch is
not in the defeat position.
The interior lights will turn on, remain on for approxi-
mately 30 seconds, and then fade to off if any of the
following occur:
• A door is opened using the outside door handle and
then closed.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• A door is unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
The interior lights will turn on, remain on for about four
seconds, and then fade to off if a door is opened using the
inside door handle.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
lights are turned on manually.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors
and liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances
up to approximately 66ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key
Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the UNLOCK
button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to
unlock both doors and the liftgate. The park lights and
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the signal,
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
and the illuminated entry system will turn on. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
NOTE: The Door Unlock Indicator
will illuminate in
the instrument cluster when one or both doors are
unlocked.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/Both Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter. To change
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature lets you program the lights to flash when the
doors are locked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Unlock On 1st Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter. To change
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Autolock
This vehicle is equipped with Autolock. If the vehicle is
unlocked while the Key Fob is outside the vehicle and the
door is not opened for 30 seconds, the car will relock.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the LOCK
button on the RKE
transmitter to lock the doors. The horn will chirp once,
and the park lights and turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlatch The Liftgate
Push the LIFTGATE
button on the RKE transmitter
two times within five seconds to unlatch the liftgate.
Push and hold the liftgate release button while pulling
up on the trunk/hatch to open.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC
button on the RKE transmitter for at
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is
on, the headlights will turn on, the park lights will
flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior
lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC
button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the
ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while
the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
and horn will remain on.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
Separating The RKE Transmitter Case
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Gulf Coast Countries (GCC)
Key Fob
Registered NO: ER36613/15
Dealer NO: DA36975/14
RFHUB
Registered NO: ER36600/15
Dealer NO: DA36975/14
KIN
Registered NO: ER0113955/13
Dealer NO: 0019345/09
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING!
• Do not touch the exhaust pipe sill covers when
entering or exiting your vehicle. They can be hot
enough to burn you. Observe the warning labels on
each door closure panel.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmis-
sion into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
engine OFF, remove the key fob from the ignition
and lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition
node is in “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from
the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always cycle the ignition
to the OFF mode lock, and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
severe personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
injured seriously or fatally. Don’t leave the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each door trim panel. Use
this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
If you push the power door lock switch
while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate.
This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key
Fob in the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF
position or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime will sound as a
reminder to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE: The Door Unlock Indicator
will illuminate in
the instrument cluster when one or both doors are
unlocked.
Automatic Door Locks
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer.
Power Door Lock Switch
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
2. The driver door is opened.
3. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control both of
the door windows.
Power Window Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
There are single window controls on the passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door window.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
The power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become en-
trapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
Both power window switches have an AUTO-down
feature. Push the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent, and release it when you want the window
to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
• If the window detects an obstacle 10 times in a row, the
auto–up feature unlearns.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
LIFTGATE
The liftgate can be unlocked or locked by the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, the manual lock cylin-
der located on the rear panel, or by activating either of
the power door lock switches located on the door trim
panels.
To unlock the liftgate with the RKE transmitter, push the
LIFTGATE
button on the RKE transmitter two
times.
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed. To
open the liftgate, push the LIFTGATE RELEASE switch
Rear Panel Manual Lock Cylinder
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
located under the right side of the tail panel, which is
located below the liftgate, then pull the liftgate open with
one fluid motion.
NOTE: The liftgate release switch will be ignored under
the following conditions:
• When vehicle speed is not 0 MPH (0 km/h).
• When all doors are locked (except for RKE transmitter
liftgate access). Refer to “Entering the Liftgate with the
System Armed” under “Vehicle Security Alarm Sys-
tem” for additional information.
The liftgate ajar icon will illuminate in the Driver Infor-
mation Display (DID) when the liftgate is open.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
Pull Up On The Liftgate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-
dren who do not use child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when-
ever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
turned to the START or ON/RUN position, an intermit-
tent chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN
position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buck-
led. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccu-
pied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un-
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
(Continued)
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING! (Continued)
your strongest bones will take the force in a colli-
sion.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Positioning The Lap Belt
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
pant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Advanced Air Bag Features
This vehicle has an Occupant Classification System
(“OCS”) in the front passenger seat. The OCS is designed
to activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag depending on the occupant’s seated weight. It is
designed to deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants whose
seated weight classifies them in a category other than a
properly seated adult. This could be a child, teenager, or
even an adult.
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (“PAD”) Indicator Light
(an amber light located in the center of the instrument
panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The
PAD Indicator Light illuminates the words “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not deploy during a collision.
NOTE: When the front passenger seat is empty or when
very light objects are placed on the seat, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light
is NOT illuminated.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
(Continued)
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) - Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to activate or deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the
occupant’s seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied
seat and for occupants whose seated weight classifies
them in a category other than a properly seated adult.
This could be a child, teenager, or even an adult.
WARNING!
• If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occu-
pant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing for-
ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of
the following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
• Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light – an
amber light located in the center of the instrument
panel (show icon)
• Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is lo-
cated beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front pas-
senger’s most probable classification. The OCM commu-
nicates this information to the ORC. The ORC uses the
classification to determine whether it should activate or
deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. In
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and prop-
erly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
• Sitting with their back against the seat back and the
seat back in an upright position
The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the Passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects in it.
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint.
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a child,
including a child seated in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat.
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
senger, including a child or small adult.
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Seated Properly
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Status
Front Passenger
Advanced Air
Bag Disabled
Indicator Light
(“PAD”) Status
Front Passenger
Air Bag Status
Unoccupied seat
*
NOT ILLUMI-
NATED
DEACTIVATED
Grocery bags,
heavy brief-
cases, and other
relatively light
objects
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Rearward facing
infant seat**
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Status
Front Passenger
Advanced Air
Bag Disabled
Indicator Light
(“PAD”) Status
Front Passenger
Air Bag Status
Child, including
a child seated in
a forward-facing
child restraint or
booster seat**
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Small adult “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Properly seated
adult
NOT ILLUMI-
NATED
ACTIVATED
* When the front passenger seat is empty or when very
light objects are placed on the seat, the Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the
PAD System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing the deployment of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in this vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag (PAD) Indicator
Light (an amber light located in the center of the instru-
ment panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The
PAD Indicator light illuminates the words “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not deploy during a collision. When
the front passenger seat is empty or when very light
objects are placed on the seat, the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the PAD
indicator light is NOT illuminated.
The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when an
adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenger
seat. The driver and adult passenger should verify that the
PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is
riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult is not seated
properly, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may deac-
tivate and the PAD Indicator Light will be illuminated.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated and the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be deactivated
for most properly seated and restrained children in the
passenger seat and for most properly installed child
restraint systems. However, under certain conditions,
even with a properly installed child restraint system, the
PAD Indicator Light may not be illuminated, even
though the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deacti-
vated. This can occur if the child restraint is lighter than
the lightest weight necessary to illuminate the PAD
Indicator Light. NEVER assume the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is deactivated unless the PAD Indicator
Light is illuminated with the words “PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF.”
If the PAD Indicator Light is Illuminated for an Adult
Passenger:
If an adult passenger is seated in the front passenger seat
and the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated, the passenger
may be sitting improperly. Follow the steps below to
allow the OCS to detect the adult passenger’s seated
weight to activate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag:
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult passenger step
out of the vehicle.
2. Remove any extra materials from the passenger seat,
such as cushions, pads, seat covers, seat massagers,
blankets, extra clothing, etc.
3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.
4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of the seat,
with the passenger’s feet comfortably on or near the
floor, and with their back against the seatback.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger remain in
this seated position for two to three minutes after
restarting the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING!
If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated for
an adult passenger, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury or death. If the PAD Indicator
Light is illuminated with the words “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult
occupies the passenger seat, the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag may be deactivated. Therefore, the Passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not be activated
for a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult
(depending on size) who is seated in the passenger seat.
This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
The driver and passenger must always use the PAD
Indicator Light as a determination of whether the Pas-
senger Advanced Front Air Bag is activated or deacti-
vated. If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” when an adult is in
the front passenger seat, have the passenger reposition
his or her body in the seat until the PAD Indicator Light
goes out.
If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter-
mines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects. The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
decreased or increased seated weight, which may result
in deactivation or activation of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that the
OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the front passen-
ger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat may
result in deactivation of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag causing serious injury or death. Increasing the
front passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger
seat may result in activation of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag. Examples of improper front passenger
seating include:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instru-
ment panel).
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways or turns
to face the rear of the vehicle.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat.
• Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
(Continued)
Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING! (Continued)
signal to the OCS that is different from the occu-
pant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing for-
ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
The Air Bag Warning Light
will illuminate whenever
the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat
status. A malfunction in the OCS may affect the
operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
(Continued)
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Placing an object on the floor under the front pas-
senger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate to show that the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain deac-
tivated until the fault is cleared. This indicates that
you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer
for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS com-
ponents that may affect Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify the
seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS compo-
nents must function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or
cushion needs service for any reason, take the vehicle to
your authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat
accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the
specific model being repaired. Always use the correct
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Door-Integrated Side Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Door-
Integrated Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front seat occupants in certain side impacts, in
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure. The SABICs are located in
the door trim below the side windows. The trim covering
the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.
The SABICs deploy upward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim
out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
SABICs are designed to activate in certain side impacts.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines
whether the deployment of the SABIC in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and
type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the SABIC on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Supplemental Door-Integrated Side Air Bag Label
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
SABIC occupant protection. In side impacts, the SABICs
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
side SABIC only and a right-side impact deploys the
right side SABIC only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a
good indicator of whether or not SABICs should have
deployed.
SABICs will not deploy in all side collisions, including
some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions
that do not impact the area of the passenger compart-
ment. SABICs may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy.
SABICs are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system.
SABICs deploy in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against
or very close to SABICs can be seriously injured or killed.
Occupants, including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the
side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from an inflating SABIC.
To get the best protection from the SABICs, occupants
must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with
their backs against the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Door-Integrated Side Air Bag Inflat-
able Curtains (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or
(Continued)
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
other cargo up high enough to block the deploy-
ment of the SABICs. The door trim below the side
windows where the SABIC and its deployment
path are located, should remain free from any
obstructions.
• SABICs need room to inflate. Do not lean against
the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• Being too close to the SABICs during deployment
could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the SABICs alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The SABICs work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, SABICs won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belt even though you have
SABICs.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious to you, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Control-
ler (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with air bag
system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in
the on position, and stays on after you start the
vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immedi-
ately.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING! (Continued)
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-
ecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-732-8243.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Cana-
da’s website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-
index-53.htm
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and
Toddlers
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child re-
straint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve-
hicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for ad-
ditional information on ALR.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the head restraints be re-
moved?
No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR re-
tractor.
Installing A Child Restraint with A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
System” for the location of approved tether anchor-
ages in your vehicle.
There is a tether strap anchor located behind
the child tether access cover behind the passen-
ger seat. To attach a child restraint tether strap
to the anchor:
1. Move the seat forward.
2. Move the seatback to its full forward position.
3. Remove the child tether access cover by prying either
side with a screwdriver or similar tool, as shown.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: While the child tether is in use, keep the access
cover in a safe place so that it can be replaced after use of
the child tether.
4. Pass the child restraint tether hook through either
opening in the seatback underneath the head restraint.
Child Seat Tether Access Cover Child Seat Tether Anchor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
5. Attach the tether hook to the anchor loop.
6. Move the seat to its farthest rearward position. Apply
body pressure to the seat to be sure the seat adjusters
have latched.
7. Return the seatback to an upright position.
8. Remove slack from the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Tether Hook
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining optimum
performance and maximum durability for your new SRT
Vehicle.
Despite modern technology and World Class manufac-
turing methods, the moving parts of the vehicle must still
wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly
during the first 500 miles (805 km) and continues through
the first oil change interval.
It is recommended for the operator to observe the follow-
ing driving behaviors during the new vehicle break-in
period:
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an
extended period of time.
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more
than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more
than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower
gears (1st to 3rd gears).
• Avoid aggressive braking.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually
(paddles or gear shift) at higher rpms when possible.
• Do not perform sustained operation with the accelera-
tor pedal at wide open throttle.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
For the first 1500 mi (2414 km):
• Do not participate in track events, sport driving
schools, or similar activities during the first 1500 mi
(2414 km).
NOTE: Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher
through the first oil change interval. Running the engine
with an oil level below the add mark can cause severe
engine damage
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
(Continued)
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds for a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled
to ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of
your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS .............................94
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror ..............94
▫ Outside Mirrors .......................98
▫ Power Mirrors ........................98
▫ Vanity Mirror .........................99
䡵 SEATS ..............................100
▫ Manual Seats ........................100
▫ Power Seats .........................103
▫ Non-Adjustable Head Restraints ..........105
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........105
䡵 LIGHTS .............................108
▫ Headlight Switch .....................108
▫ Automatic Headlights ..................109
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) .............109
▫ Headlight Time Delay ..................109
▫ Daytime Running Lights ................110
▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................110
▫ Multifunction Lever ...................111
▫ Turn Signals .........................111
3
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ................112
▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................112
▫ Interior Lights .......................112
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......114
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............114
▫ Wiper Operation ......................115
▫ Mist Feature .........................115
▫ Windshield Washers ...................116
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) .............117
䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN ...............117
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS ..................118
▫ Adjustable Foot Rest ...................119
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ...........120
▫ To Activate ..........................121
▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................122
▫ To Deactivate ........................122
▫ To Resume Speed .....................122
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............122
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ................124
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................124
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .126
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .127
▫ Programming A Rolling Code .............128
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........130
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......131
▫ Using HomeLink .....................133
▫ Security ............................133
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ...................133
▫ General Information....................134
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ...........135
▫ Auxiliary Jumper Harness ...............137
䡵 CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED ...........139
䡵 STORAGE ............................140
▫ Glove Compartment ...................140
▫ Console Features ......................141
▫ Door Storage.........................143
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............143
▫ Rear Window Defroster .................143
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.
If Equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only
be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active
and you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network.
Assist Calls
The ASSIST Button is used for contacting Roadside
Assistance, Vehicle Care and Uconnect Care. The 9-1-1
Button connects you to emergency services to someone
who can help. Roadside Assistance will know what
vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional fees
may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile
features.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
9-1-1 Call
Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
touch screen.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able
to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system will attempt to remain connected with the
9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the
connection.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
(Continued)
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable
1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS anten-
nas. You could prevent operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G(data) network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network
and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call
system to function properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi-
cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT-
TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Vanity Mirror
A vanity mirror is on the passenger side sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward.
Vanity Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Seats
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
Seat Adjustment Bar
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear-
ward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Seat Height Adjustment
The seat height adjustment lever is located on the out-
board side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise
the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower
the seat height.
Height Adjustment Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Recliner Adjustment
The recliner lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, pull the
recliner lever upward, lean backward until the seat is in
the desired position, and release the lever. To return the
seat to its full upright position, lean forward, pull the
recliner lever upward and hold it until the seat returns to
its full upright position.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Recline Lever
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats
On models equipped with power seats, the power seat
switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the
floor.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the power seat recliner switch forward or rearward,
the seatback will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Power Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Seat Recliner Switch
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Non-Adjustable Head Restraints
The non-adjustable head restraints are form fitted into
the upper structure of the seatback and are designed to
reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in
the event of a rear impact. The seatback should be
properly adjusted to an upright position where the head
restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of
your head.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for passengers. An improperly
latched seatback could cause serious injury.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
1. Reach into the back side area of the drivers front
fender to gain access to the hood release lever.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
2. Pull the hood release lever rearward to release the
hood latches.
3. Lift the hood upward to the full forward position.
Hood Release Lever Location Hood Release Lever
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The recommended lift point is to place the lifting
hand forward of one of the wiper arms and pull up. The
assist props will help raise and hold the hood to a normal
usage position.
CAUTION!
• Do not leave the hood open in areas where strong
gust of wind are likely. Such a place might be by
the side of the road where large trucks pass by.
Strong gusts of wind may damage the hood. Al-
ways close the hood in such situations.
• To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood
to close it. Simply lower the hood until it is open
approximately 18 in (46 cm) and then drop it. This
should secure both latches. If both latches did not
secure, a slight push effort in the same area used
for opening the hood (front of wiper arm) needs to
be applied to secure the latches. Never drive the
vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both
latches engaged.
Opened Hood
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru-
ment panel lights, instrument panel light dimming and
interior lights.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op-
eration.
Headlight Switch
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A
(AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after placing the ignition
in the OFF position. To turn the Automatic system off,
move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place
the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the
delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
Daytime Running Lights
The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on when-
ever the engine is running and the park brake is off. The
headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Driver
Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel. Rotating
the dimmer control upward with the parking lights or
headlights on will increase the brightness of the instru-
ment panel lights and ambient lighting.
Interior Light Control
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Dimmer Control
Interior Lights
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, Driver Information Display (DID),
and radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi-
tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Mist Feature
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob,
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the first detent and release. The wipers will cycle one
time and automatically shut off.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the
wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer
knob is released from this position.
If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range,
the wiper will operate for several seconds after the
washer knob is released. It will then resume the intermit-
tent interval previously selected. If the washer knob is
pushed while in the off position, the wiper will turn on
and cycle approximately three times after the wash knob
is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
The tilt release lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the left side of the steering column. To tilt the
column, simply pull the release lever rearward toward
you and then move the steering wheel upward or down-
ward as desired. When the column is in the desired
position, push the release lever forward to lock the
column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Column Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
and clutch pedal to move toward or away from the driver
to provide improved position with the steering wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of
the steering column.
Push the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Push the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
Adjustable Pedals Switch
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
Adjustable Foot Rest
This feature allows the driver to adjust the foot rest
forward or backward and to rotate it upward or down-
ward to allow for greater driving comfort.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
To adjust the pedal:
1. Adjust the seat and steering column to a comfortable
position.
2. Using a socket wrench, loosen the nut on the pedal.
3. Slide the pedal either forward or backward and rotate
it upward or downward as desired.
4. Tighten the nut, being careful not to over tighten it.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Adjustable Foot Rest
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple speed control buttons are pushed at the
same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the Electronic Speed
Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Driver Infor-
mation Display (DID) will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +
4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, manually accelerating 10 mph (16 km/h) above
the set speed or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
out erasing the set speed memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The speed increment shown is dependent on the selected
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the selected
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Push the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: If the accelerated speed goes above 10 mph
(16 km/h) of the set speed, the Electronic Speed Control
will deactivate.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear license plate. The image will be displayed
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro-
grammable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed ex-
ceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF
position.
When the Vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
camera delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited
and the last touchscreen appears again.
The active guide lines are overlaid on the image to
illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink buttons, located on the sunvisor, desig-
nate the three different HomeLink channels. The
HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds, or until the red
indicator flashes.
HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you would like
to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the fre-
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons after the indicator light changes from
slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Non
— Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button,
while you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with two 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlet that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics and other low powered electrical acces-
sories.
One power outlet is located on the center console to the
right of the shifter. Push down on the power outlet to
access the opening. Push down on it again to close. This
power outlet is powered when the ignition is in the ON
or ACC position.
The second power outlet is located between the seat
backs above the cup holders. This power outlet is con-
nected directly by the battery and powered at all times.
Front Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
(Continued)
Center Console Outlet
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Auxiliary Jumper Harness
The Viper is equipped with an auxiliary power jumper,
allowing an electronic device to be directly connected to
the vehicle without having to use the console power
outlets. Power to the device will be controlled by the
ignition switch.
NOTE: The electronic device must draw less than five
amps to prevent damage.
To install, remove the mirror cover by pulling straight
down and separating the cover pieces.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Connect the auxiliary port jumper into the unused con-
nector taped to the wiring bundle. Connect the other end
of the auxiliary port jumper to the electronic device.
NOTE: The red wire in the bundle is the power wire and
will provide the positive 12 volts to the electronic device.
Mirror Cover Removal
Auxiliary Port Jumper
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Re-install the mirror cover and be sure to not pinch the
wires that go into the electronic device.
CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED
There are two cupholders located in the rear of the center
console.
Mirror Cover Installation
Center Console Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
An electronic glove compartment is located on the pas-
senger side of the instrument panel. Push in the button to
open the glove compartment.
NOTE: The glove compartment will lock with the door
locks unless the key fob is detected inside the vehicle.
Glove Compartment
Opened Glove Compartment
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Console Features
Console Cubby Bin — If Equipped
An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the
center console rearward of the shift lever.
Cargo Net Storage — If Equipped
There is a cargo net storage area located between the
driver and passengers seat.
Center Console Cubby Bin Location
Cargo Net Storage Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Storage Bin — If Equipped
There is a storage bin located between the driver and
passengers seat. Pull up on the release lever to open the
storage bin.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
Storage Bin Location
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas located in the
lower center area of the door panel.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Push this button to turn
on the rear window defroster. An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, push the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
Door Panel Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........148
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................149
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS .......151
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ..............152
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights ............162
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights ............170
▫ White Telltale Indicator Light .............172
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Light ..............173
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) .....174
▫ DID Display .........................176
▫ Driver Information Display (DID) Messages . . .178
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items...............180
䡵 CYBERSECURITY.......................188
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................190
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate................191
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen..............191
▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect 8.4 System Settings .....191
▫ SRT Performance Pages .................205
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED ......209
4
䡵 iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .210
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......210
▫ Radio Operation ......................211
䡵 RADIO ANTENNA .....................212
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . .212
▫ General Information ...................212
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................212
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC).......213
▫ Summer Operation ....................218
▫ Winter Operation......................218
▫ Vacation/Storage .....................219
▫ Window Fogging and Frosting ............219
▫ Outside Air Intake .....................219
▫ Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather
Conditions ..........................220
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR ..............221
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS ................................221
▫ Introducing Uconnect...................221
▫ Get Started ..........................222
▫ Basic Voice Commands..................223
▫ Radio ..............................224
▫ Media..............................225
▫ Phone..............................226
▫ Voice Text Reply ......................227
▫ Climate (8.4AN) ......................229
▫ Navigation (8.4AN) ....................230
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4AN) ................231
▫ Vehicle Health Alert ...................232
▫ Register (8.4AN) ......................232
▫ Mobile App (8.4AN) ...................233
▫ Voice Texting (8.4AN) ..................234
▫ Yelp (8.4AN) .........................236
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4AN) .............237
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped .............238
▫ Do Not Disturb ......................238
▫ General Information....................239
▫ Additional Information .................240
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 6 — Passenger Air Bag 11 — Climate Controls
2 — Sound System Speaker 7 — Glove Compartment 12 — Dimmer Controls
3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Uconnect System 13 — Headlight Switch
4 — Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop Button 9 — Uconnect System Hard Controls
5 — Glove Compartment Lock 10 — Switch Bank (Screen Off, Hazard
Switch, Back Button)
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
1. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed
2. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
3. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather or up moun-
tain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator light switches on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes-
sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains un-
buckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is
first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer
to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further infor-
mation.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
United States
Canada
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and
the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4
minutes, or until the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Charging System Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s nonessential electrical devices or increase
engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is
experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an
authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emer-
gencies.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-
hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-
pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be driv-
able; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Re-
fer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
Trunk Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-
eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-
viced as soon as possible if this occurs.
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the ve-
hicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused
the ESC activation.
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disen-
gage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.5 gal (5.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indi-
cate function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on and
stays on at road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has be-
come inoperative. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer
immediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting And Operating” for further in-
formation.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Tell-
tale Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT turn
signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when
the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been engaged.
White Telltale Indicator Light
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blue Telltale Indicator Light
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver-
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pushing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The DID consists of the following:
• Tachometer
• MPH/KMH
• Vehicle Information
• Fuel Economy
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
• Performance
• Diagnostics
Driver Information Display (DID)
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Hibernation
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and sub-
menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio,
Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Au-
dio, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
DID Steering Wheels Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access/select the information screens or sub-
menu screens of a main menu item. Push and
hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds
to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
• LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
return to the main menu from an info screen or
submenu item.
NOTE: Pushing any arrow will override the DID “pop
up” messages and return you to the menu screen.
DID Display
The DID display is located in the center portion of the
instrument cluster and consists of the following sections:
DID Display
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
white for on demand information.
2. Audio / Phone Information and Sub-menu Informa-
tion — Whenever there are sub-menus available, the
position within the sub-menus is shown here.
3. Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
4. Telltales/Indicators
5. Selectable Information (Tach, Mph/Kmh, Vehicle Info,
Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio, Stored Messages,
Screen Setup, Performance, Diagnostics, Hibernation)
6. Suspension Status — The suspension status icon will
illuminate in this area. Refer to “Starting And Operat-
ing” for further information.
7. ESC Status — The ESC status icon will illuminate in
this area. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
8. Launch Control status when launch control mode is
entered. Refer to “Launch Mode” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in
the DID’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out”
and “Low Tire Pressure.”
NOTE: Pushing the LEFT arrow button will override the
DID “pop up” messages and return you to the menu
screen.
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams
On.”
Driver Information Display (DID) Messages
• Front Seat Belts Unbuckled
• Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Key Fob Battery Low
• Service Air Bag System
• ESC Status (ESC OFF, ESC ON, ESC SPORT, ESC
TRACK, RAIN MODE) — Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control System” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
• Oil Pressure Low
• Fuel Low
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire Pressure Warnings
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Battery Voltage Low
• Brake Wear
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Lights On
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Turn Signal On
• Service Air Bag System
• Service Air Bag Warning Light
• Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Front Seat Belts Unbuckled
• Door Open
• Doors Open
• Park Brake Engaged
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
DID Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
DID.
Tachometer
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Tachometer icon is highlighted
in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow
button to change the display between full
tachometer or tachometer with digital speedometer.
MPH To km/h
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the MPH to km/h icon is high-
lighted in the DID. Push and release the OK
button to change the display between MPH
or km/h.
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted
in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow
button to display the following information
submenus:
Tire Pressure
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and one of the follow-
ing will be displayed:
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
the ICON.
• If one or more tires have low pressure, the tire pressure
values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure
value of the low tire displayed in a different color than
the other tire pressure value.
• If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service
Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to return
to the main menu.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Coolant Temperature
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Coolant Temperature” is highlighted in the DID. Push
and release the RIGHT arrow button, and the coolant
temperature will be displayed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
Oil Temperature
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Oil Temperature” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the oil temperature
will be displayed.
Engine Hours
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Engine Hours” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the engine hours
will be displayed.
Intake Air Temp.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Intake Air Temp.” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the intake air
temperature will be displayed.
Current Torque
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Current Torque” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the current torque
will be displayed.
Current Power
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Current Power” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the current power
will be displayed.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Fuel Economy icon is high-
lighted and the following will display:
Range To Empty (RTE)
Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG Bar-
graph)
Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Trip A
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in
the DID. The Trip A information will display
the following:
• Distance
• Average Speed
• Elapsed Time
Hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset all the informa-
tion.
TripB—IfEquipped
Push and release UP or DOWN arrow button
until the Trip B icon is highlighted in the DID.
The Trip B information will display the
following:
• Distance
• Average Speed
• Elapsed Time
Hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset all the information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
Audio
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Audio display icon is high-
lighted in the DID. Push and release the
RIGHT arrow button to display the active
source.
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Messages Menu item is high-
lighted in the DID. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pushing
the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are.
When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a
closed envelope.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
• None
• Compass
• Temperature
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Average Fuel
• Current Fuel
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Temperature
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Battery
• Coolant Temperature
Upper Right
• None
• Compass
• Temperature
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Average Fuel
• Current Fuel
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Temperature
• Battery
• Coolant Temperature
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
confirm.
Digital Speed
• On
• Off
Tach. Peak Hold
When enabled, the Tach. Peak Hold function marks the
peak Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) on the tachometer
gauge for 3 seconds when the RPM is above 4000. Using
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
the UP and DOWN arrow switches on the left side of the
steering wheel, select the gauges icon from the menu on
the left side of the cluster (highlighted red is the active
menu item). Use the RIGHT arrow to enter the gauges
setup screen and the UP/DOWN arrows to select Tach
Peak from the menu of gauge options.
Select up and down to toggle between “ON” and “OFF.”
SRT Performance
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Perfor-
mance Features is intended for off-highway or off-
road use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
(Continued)
Tach. Peak Hold
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING! (Continued)
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the SRT icon is highlighted in the DID. Push and release
the RIGHT arrow button, and 0–60 MPH Duration will
be displayed. Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT
arrow button to scroll through the following information
sub-menus:
0–60 Time
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the last 0–60 MPH information is displayed.
Braking Distance
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the last Braking Distance information is displayed.
1/4 Mile Elapsed Time
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the last 1/4 Mile Top Speed & Duration information
is displayed.
1/8 Mile Elapsed Time
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the last 1/8 Mile Top Speed & Duration information
is displayed.
G-Force Instant
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the Current G-Forces are displayed.
G-Force Peak
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the Peak G-Forces are displayed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
Diagnostic Codes
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Diagnostic Code icon is high-
lighted in the DID. Push and release the
RIGHT arrow button to display any present
diagnostic trouble codes along with a brief definition.
Vehicle Hibernation
To Activate Hibernation Mode
1. Cycle the ignition switch to (ACC).
2. Select Hibernation mode within the Driver
Information Display (DID).
3. Push the RIGHT arrow button on the steering wheel
controls for one second. Vehicle will countdown from
ten seconds and enter Hibernation Mode.
NOTE: You may push the RIGHT arrow button on the
steering wheel controls during the countdown to abort
Hibernation Mode.
To Deactivate Hibernation Mode
1. Push the RKE UNLOCK button to unlock the vehicle.
2. Push the Keyless Push Button Ignition to the ON/
RUN position.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor-
mation. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar
to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require
software updates to improve the usability and perfor-
mance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle sys-
tems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
including safety related systems, could be im-
paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain mali-
cious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle be-
havior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Privacy Prac-
tices” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your Owner’s
Manual Radio Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” in your Owner’s Manual on the DVD.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
NOTE: Features can vary by vehicle, depending on
vehicle configuration.
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instru-
ment panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect display.
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect 8.4 System Settings
Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then press
the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
Uconnect 8.4AN Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Engine Off Options,
Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Set-
tings, Clear Personal Data, and System Information.
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the
desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected.
Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu
or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
button on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the list of available settings.
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Display Mode
This feature will allow you to select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, press and re-
lease the Auto or Manual button on the touchscreen.
Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This feature will allow you to select the display bright-
ness when the headlights are on. Adjust the brightness
with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen,
then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
the radio to activate the “Display Brightness With Head-
lights OFF” control even though the headlights are on.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This feature will allow you to select the display bright-
ness when the headlights are off. Adjust the brightness
with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen,
then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
• Set Theme — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to choose a theme for the
display screen. The theme will change the background
color, highlight color, and button color of the display
screen.
• Set Language
This feature will allow you to select one of the languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set
Language button on the touchscreen and then press the
desired language button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the language, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
• Units
This feature will allow you to have the DID, odometer,
and navigation system (if equipped) changed between
US and Metric units of measure. Press US or Metric until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
• Touchscreen Beep
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. Press
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
the Touchscreen Beep button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
• Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will
stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
until it is manually closed. Press the Control Screen
Time-Out button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the DID as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To turn on
or enable, press the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu or push the back button on
the faceplate.
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may choose to Always, With
Help, or Never display the Teleprompter with possible
options while in a voice session. To change the Show
Command List settings, press the “Always,” “With
Help,” or “Never” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Sync Time With GPS
This feature will allow you to automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
the “Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Set Time Hours
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu or press the” X” button on
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
• Set Time Minutes
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu or press the “X” button on
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
• Time Format
This feature will allow you to select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs
or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu, or push the back button on the
faceplate.
Safety & Driving Assistance — If Equipped
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on
the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the previous screen appears again. When the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON),
the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the
“settings” button, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance”
button on the touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup
camera Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the
ParkView Delay ON or OFF.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. To make your selection, press the “Hill
Start Assist” button on the touchscreen until a check-
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
has been selected. Press the back arrow/Done button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status, press the “+” or “-” button on the touch-
screen to select your desired time interval. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
• Headlights With Wipers
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Daytime Running Lights
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the vehicle is set in motion. To make your
selection, press the Daytime Running Lights button on
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press the Flash Lights
with Lock button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available.
• Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door
Locks” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press the Auto Unlock On Exit
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu, or push the back button on the
faceplate.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry
Feature. To make your selection, press the Flash Lights
With Lock button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your
selection, push the Sound Horn With Remote Lock
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu, or push the back button on the
faceplate.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro-
grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
RKE transmitter).
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle”.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
“Engine Off Power Delay” status, press the 0 seconds, 45
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes button on the touch-
screen. Then press the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the “Headlight Off
Delay” status, press the ⬙Up⬙ or ⬙Down⬙ arrow button on
the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. Press
the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
• Equalizer
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
press the “Off,” “1,” “2,” or “3” button on the touch-
screen. Then press the arrow back button on the touch-
screen.
• Surround Sound
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the Surround Sound button
on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off” followed by
pressing the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
• Loudness
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen
• AUX Volume Offset
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Match”
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the “Uconnect Supplement Manual.”
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the “Uconnect Supplement Manual.”
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from the
beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of
the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song.
This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the back-
ground, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that
you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song
with only a few seconds left to play. To make your
selection, press the “Tune Start” button on the touch-
screen, select “On” or “Off.”
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the
settings are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings
reset to default.⬙ Press the okay button on the touchscreen
to exit.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to
Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared,
a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared.”
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• System Information
When System Information is selected, a System Informa-
tion screen will appear displaying the system software
version.
SRT Performance Pages
To access the SRT Performance Pages, press the “Apps”
button on the touchscreen then select the “SRT Perfor-
mance Pages” App from the list. Press the UP or DOWN
buttons on the touchscreen to cycle through the list.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the SRT Per-
formance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-
road use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the Performance Pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
CAUTION!
Check engine oil level at every fuel fill-up. Running
an engine with a low oil level can cause severe
(Continued)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
CAUTION! (Continued)
engine damage. Engine oil level must be maintained
within the safe zone on the engine oil dipstick or
severe engine damage may occur. Refer to the “Main-
tenance Schedule” for further information.
The SRT Performance Pages include the following:
• Home
• Timers
• G-Force
• Gauges 1
• Gauges 2
• Engine
• Options
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Timers
When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to
select from following “Tickets”:
• Current
Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time”
summary of performance timers.
• Last
Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run
of performance timers.
• Best
Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run
of performance timers, except for braking data.
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Save
Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the last run.
Any saved run over 10, will overwrite the last saved run
for Uconnect System storage. The operation of the Save
feature is listed below:
• With a USB jump drive installed, press the “USB”
button to save runs to the jump drive.
• With an SD Card installed, press the “SD Card” to save
runs to the SD Card.
• Press the “Uconnect” button to save the runs to the
Owner web page.
• Press the “Cancel” button to view the last timer
“Ticket.”
The “Tickets” contain the timers listed below:
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ Mile
(200 meters).
• ¼ mile (400 meter)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ¼ mile
(400 meters).
• Brake Distance
Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full
stop. Contains current and last data for distance and start
– from speed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
NOTE: The distance measurement will be aborted if the
brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a
complete stop.
• Brake Speed
Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the
brake pedal is depressed.
NOTE: Brake Distance and Speed timers will only dis-
play ⬙ready⬙ when vehicle is traveling at greater than
30 MPH (48 km/h).
G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as
steering angle.
When a G-Force greater than zero is measured, the
display will update the value real-time.
Gauges 1
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Gauges 2
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Coolant Temperature
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Intake Air Temperature
Displays the actual intake air temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Engine
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Speed (mph)
Displays the actual speed.
• Horsepower (hp)
Displays the actual horsepower.
• Torque (ft-lb)
Displays the actual torque.
• Oil Pressure (psi)
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Options
When selected, this screen allows you to set your SRT
home page picture, and configure the vehicle color
shown in the G-Force screen.
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Located at the rear area of the center console, this feature
allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into
the USB port.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod
and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may
not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Supple-
ment Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
SD Card Slot, AUX Jack, And USB Port
1 — SD Card Slot
2 — AUX Jack
3 — USB Port
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch
will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or other valid audio source.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set buttons.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
RADIO ANTENNA
The am/fm radio antenna is located in the windshield.
The Satellite/Navigation antenna is located in the rear
liftgate, while the cellular phone antenna is on the
windshield behind the interior rearview mirror.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
Under certain conditions, the mobile device being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile device operation when
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Buttons On The Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect touchscreen.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system touchscreen.
Automatic Climate Controls
Uconnect Temperature Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Temperature Control
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
more information. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the buttons on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen as follows:
Button On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
8. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located
below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount
of airflow from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
9. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
10. Temperature Control Down Button
Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
11. Temperature Control Up Button
Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-
senger temperature control buttons. Once the desired
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
feature. Refer to the “Customer Programmable Fea-
tures — Uconnect System Settings” in this section of
the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humid-
ity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to
recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION
control button. Recirculation mode should only be used
temporarily. The recirculation LED will illuminate on the
blower control knob when this button is selected. Push
the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation
mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled auto-
matically if these modes are selected.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in
fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging and Frosting
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost
on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation
mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may
occur.
NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will au-
tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce
or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In winter months, ensure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush and snow.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
3. The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/
shortcut on the main menu bar.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these help-
ful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 8.4AN
system.
Uconnect 8.4AN Main Menu
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4AN system.
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing in-
structions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect 8.4AN
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Two buttons are all you need to control your Uconnect
system with your voice.
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Voice Recognition (VR)/Phone Buttons
1 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-
ceive A Text
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect 8.4AN
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect 8.4AN Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illumi-
nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say one of
the following commands:
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect 8.4AN Media
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
the Phone button
and say Listen. (Must have com-
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the Phone button
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
Uconnect 8.4AN Phone
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be <num-
ber> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but
if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
Climate (8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-
free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Set temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Uconnect 8.4AN Climate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
Navigation (8.4AN)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say:
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: “Navigate to
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 8.4AN Navigation
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect Access (8.4AN)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the “Apps” button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to
get started. Detailed registration instructions can be
found on the next page.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
Wi-Fi Hotspot***
***Extra charges apply.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Register (8.4AN)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your
vehicle and handle all of the details.
Assist Button
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen to
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Mobile App (8.4AN)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
mands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
Mobile App
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and
press Link.
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,
pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you
want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream
your personalized music.
NOTE:
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
• Once you download the app to your compatible
mobile device, you will also be able to start your
vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually any-
where.
Voice Texting (8.4AN)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After
the beep, say the following command: “Send mes-
sage to John Smith.”
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to
process your message.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
to send a personalized text message. For details about
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
TIP:
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touch-
screen, push the VR button
, then say: “YELP
search.”
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect to find.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN
system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
Yelp
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com-
mand.
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings,
set reminders, and more. For further information go to
the Mopar Owner Connect website
moparownerconnect.com.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your conve-
nience there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you were using Do
Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac-
ters.
SiriusXM Travel Link
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being inter-
rupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iP-
hones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
•
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC
and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
Gulf Coast Countries (GCC)
Bluetooth
TRA
Register No: ER0095499/12
Dealer No: 0028019/10
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
Uconnect System Support:
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) for U.S. residents
call:1-877-855-8400 or visit DriveUconnect.com.
Canadian residents (English) call:1-800-465-2001 Cana-
dian residents (French) call:1-800-387-9983 or visit
DriveUconnect.ca.
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed
Uconnect Access Services Support: 1-855-792-4241 Please
have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................244
▫ Normal Starting.......................244
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................246
▫ After Starting ........................247
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION ...............247
▫ Shifting.............................248
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds ..............250
▫ Skip Shift Indicator Light ...............250
䡵 STREET/RACE MODE — IF EQUIPPED ......251
䡵 LAUNCH MODE .......................253
䡵 TRACK USE ..........................255
▫ Guidelines For Track Use ................255
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........256
▫ Acceleration .........................256
▫ Traction ............................256
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............257
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................257
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................258
䡵 POWER STEERING .....................259
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ..............260
5
䡵 PARKING BRAKE ......................261
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................263
▫ Brake Pad Break-In ....................263
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .264
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System ................265
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............267
▫ Electronic Stability Control ..............267
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............272
▫ Tire Markings ........................272
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........275
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........277
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........278
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........283
▫ Tire Pressure ........................283
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................284
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .286
▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................286
▫ Tire Types ...........................287
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............288
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............288
▫ Tire Spinning ........................291
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................291
▫ Life Of Tire .........................292
▫ Replacement Tires .....................293
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......295
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....295
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .296
▫ Premium System ......................299
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................302
▫ 8.4L Engine ..........................302
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................303
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............303
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......304
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................304
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................304
▫ Fuel System Cautions...................305
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............306
䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................307
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release.........308
䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................311
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................311
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) ............................311
䡵 GROUND CLEARANCE .................312
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct any other occupant to buckle their seat
belt.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key Fob in
or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Long periods of engine idling, especially at higher
than normal engine idle speeds, can cause exces-
sive exhaust temperatures, which can damage your
vehicle. Do not leave your vehicle unattended with
the engine running.
• Running an engine with a low oil level can cause
severe damage. Check the engine oil level at every
fuel fill-up.
Normal Starting
CAUTION!
The engine in your vehicle is designed for operation
down to 0°F (-18°C). Starting the engine below 0°F
(-18°C) coolant temperature creates a potential for
(Continued)
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
scuffing or seizing of internal components in this
high performance engine. To prevent engine damage,
do not start the engine at temperatures below 0°F
(-18°C).
NOTE:
• You must disarm the security system in order to start
the engine. Refer to “Security Alarm System” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
• Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
However, if the engine has not started within three
seconds, slightly press the accelerator pedal while
continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start within
15 seconds, wait five seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
To Start The Engine:
1. Fully apply the parking brake.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor.
NOTE: The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal
is pressed to the floor.
3. Place the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
4. Push the red ENGINE START/STOP button located
on the instrument panel. Release the button when the
engine starts.
If Engine Fails To Start
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite
(Continued)
Engine START/STOP Button
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
and damage the converter and vehicle. If the ve-
hicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or
the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can
be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this
procedure carefully. Refer to “Jump-Starting” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further informa-
tion.
If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have
enough power to continue running when the ENGINE
START button is released. If this occurs, continue crank-
ing up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed
all the way to the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and
the ENGINE START button once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should
be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
NOTE: The parking brake should be engaged and the
shift lever placed into REVERSE before leaving the
vehicle, especially when parked on an incline.
Your vehicle is equipped with a high torque capacity dual
disc clutch. The clutch pedal must be fully pressed to the
floor during each shift. As you release the clutch pedal,
lightly press the accelerator pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
CAUTION!
• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.
• Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor
may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in
damage to the clutch and transmission.
• Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while
driving, as this may result in transmission damage.
• Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear
wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Dam-
age to the transmission may occur.
Ensure the transmission is in first gear when moving
forward from a standing position.
CAUTION!
Failure to start out in first gear when moving forward
from a starting position may result in damage to the
clutch.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the
clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage
to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not
fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator
pedal when shifting.
The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that
centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second
or downshifting from sixth to fifth.
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and
fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into
second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the
direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first
to fourth or from sixth to third gear.
You will find it easier to use only the lower gears for most
city driving. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, sixth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse
inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help
prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop,
you may notice light shift efforts into REVERSE with
the ignition in the ON position, and increased shift
efforts into REVERSE with the ignition in the OFF
position. This is normal operation of the transmission
reverse inhibitor system.
• Shifting gears during cold weather may require an
increased effort until the transmission lubricant is
warm. This is normal and not harmful to the transmis-
sion.
• Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
a certain amount of noise from the transmission is
normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the
vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
(clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when
driving. The noise may also be more noticeable when
the transmission is warm. This noise is normal and is
not an indication of a problem with your clutch or
transmission.
• You must always use first gear (or REVERSE) when
starting from a standing position.
CAUTION!
Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete
stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so
may result in transmission damage.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transmission for fuel economy it
should be upshifted as listed below. Shift at the vehicle
speeds listed for acceleration. Earlier upshifts during
cruise conditions (relatively steady speeds) will result in
increased fuel economy, and may be used as indicated.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS
1-4 4-5 5-6
mph 17 45 50
(km/h) (27) (72) (80)
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
Skip Shift Indicator Light
There are times when you must shift the trans-
mission directly from first gear into fourth gear
instead of from first gear into second gear. This
is to help you get the best possible fuel
economy from your vehicle. This occurs when engine
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
coolant is higher than 107°F (42°C), and vehicle speed is
greater than 16 mph (26 km/h) but less than 18 mph
(29 km/h), and engine speed is less than 1,550 RPM, and
the transmission is in first gear, and the accelerator is at
20% throttle or less. The “Skip Shift Indicator Light”
located in the tachometer will illuminate during these
times.
When the “Skip Shift Indicator Light” illuminates, the
shift mechanism will only allow shifts from first gear to
fourth gear. After you shift the transmission into fourth
gear, you can press the clutch in and shift to another
forward gear.
Downshifting - Proper downshifting will improve fuel
economy and prolong engine life.
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, down-
shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep
grade.
CAUTION!
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high a vehicle speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
WARNING!
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
could have a collision.
STREET/RACE MODE — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with a two mode electronic
controlled damping system. This system allows for a
compliant street suspension damping setting or a firmer
race suspension damping setting. When in street mode
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
the system will automatically shift the suspension damp-
ers to the firmer Race damping setting during some hard
acceleration and braking situations. There are two modes
of operation:
• Street Mode — This mode will give a sporty, but
comfortable ride. This mode is driver selectable when
the vehicle is placed in STREET mode (push the
“STREET” button on the Instrument Panel). This mode
is intended for a smoother ride on the various types of
pavement and road conditions while still providing
damping levels appropriate extreme capabilities.
• Race Mode — This mode is driver selectable when the
vehicle is placed in RACE mode (push the “RACE”
button on the Instrument Panel). This mode is for track
use only and will supply maximum grip to the tires.
NOTE:
• With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the sus-
pension damping system will be in the last mode the
system was in when the vehicle was turned off. The
driver can select either Street or Race damping mode
at any time.
• The suspension mode will lock and stay in whatever
the driver selects even when the ignition is turned off
and the car restarted.
• The RACE setting will provide a much firmer ride.
• When RACE mode is enabled, a Shock symbol with
“RACE” next to it will light up in the instrument
cluster.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
LAUNCH MODE
This system maximizes acceleration traction for straight
line racing.
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop on a level track
surface with the engine running.
2. Set the steering wheel for straight ahead driving.
3. Fully depress the clutch and select the first gear
position.
4. Push and release the “LAUNCH” button (located on
the steering wheel controls).
5. Rapidly press the accelerator pedal to the floor within
one second.
LAUNCH Button
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
NOTE: If the cluster launch DID message indicates all
conditions are correct for launch and the throttle is
pressed to the floor quickly (within approximately 1/2
second) the system will hold the engine speed to a preset
speed (below the engine rev limiter speed).
6. Release the clutch aggressively. Do not ride the clutch.
Release the accelerator pedal to deactivate launch con-
trol. Pushing the launch control button or actuating the
brakes will also deactivate launch control.
NOTE:
• Launch Mode brings the engine to optimum launch
RPM and waits for the driver to release the clutch.
Launch Mode then uses engine throttle only to achieve
controlled wheelslip for maximum acceleration
through first gear.
• Launch Mode can be used in any of the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) Modes.
• Launch Mode should not be used within the first 500
miles (805 km) of engine break-in.
WARNING!
Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be
used in a controlled environment, and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRACK USE
Guidelines For Track Use
NOTE: Because of the extreme conditions encountered
during track use, any damage or wear associated with
track use is not covered by warranty.
• It is recommended that the shocks be operated in
RACE mode, if equipped.
• ESC is track capable in all modes.
Prior To Each Track Event/Day
• Verify all fluids are at the correct levels. Refer to “Fluid
Capacities” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• Verify the front and rear brake pads have more than ½
pad thickness remaining. If the brake pads require
changing, please burnish prior to track outing at full
pace.
• Tire pressure:
– 35psi hot recommended. This typically can be
achieved with cold pressures between 25 and 29 psi,
depending on driver, track, and ambient conditions.
Conclusion Of Each Track Event
• It is recommended that a brake bleed procedure is
performed to maintain the pedal feel and stopping
capability of your brake system.
• It is recommended that each track outing should end
with a minimum of 1 cool down lap using minimal
braking.
• Following each track session, tires should be inspected
for wear.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
NOTE:
• All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours of
endurance, however, it is recommended that suspen-
sion system, brake system, prop shaft, and ½ shaft
boots should be checked for wear or damage after
every track event.
• Track usage results in increased operating tempera-
tures of the engine, transmission, clutch, driveline and
brake system. This may affect noise (NVH) counter-
measures designed into your vehicle. New compo-
nents may need to be installed to return the system to
the original NVH performance.
For ACR models, please review the supplemental manual
for track tips.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly
have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
CAUTION!
Driving your vehicle through deep puddles at speeds
over 5 mph (8 km/h), may cause water to be ingested
into the engine. This can cause severe engine dam-
age.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
(Continued)
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure you fully apply
the parking brake and shift the transmission into
REVERSE. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
As an added precaution when parking the vehicle, turn
the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
To apply the parking brake, grasp the handle and pull it
rearward until you feel resistance. To release the parking
brake, grasp the handle and pull it slightly while pushing
the button on the end of the handle. When the button
drops into the handle (releasing the lock), guide the
handle downward to its stop and then release the button
and the handle.
Parking Brake Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
The “Brake System Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will turn on when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and the parking brake is applied.
NOTE:
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied
or a brake/ABS system fault. It does not show the
degree of brake application. If the “Brake System
Warning Light” is illuminated when the parking brake
is not applied, please see your authorized dealer.
• Each time the parking brake is applied, the instrument
cluster will automatically go to the highest illumina-
tion setting regardless of the dimmer control setting.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
injured seriously or fatally. Do not leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible
to children), and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the ve-
hicle.
• Ensure the parking brake is fully disengaged be-
fore driving. Failure to do so can lead to brake
failure, and an accident.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will
be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may
notice increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake System Warning Light.”
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
Brake Pad Break-In
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high perfor-
mance braking system. The brake pads are a semi-
metallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance
for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type
of brake pad is that the brakes may squeal slightly under
certain weather and operating conditions (.i.e., during
light brake applications).
The brakes on your new vehicle do not require a long
break-in period. However, you should avoid repeated
hard brake applications from high speeds during initial
break-in. In addition, you should avoid severe brake
loading, such as may be encountered when descending
long mountain grades.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
Safe Operating Tips
WARNING!
To use your brakes and accelerator more safely,
follow these tips:
• Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the
pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
unpredictable braking action, longer stopping dis-
tances, or brake damage.
• When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking
control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by down-
shifting the transmission whenever possible.
• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially
when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can
build up between the tire tread and the road. This
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction,
braking ability, and control.
• After going through deep water or a car wash,
brakes may become wet, resulting in decreased
performance and unpredictable braking action.
Dry the brakes by gentle, intermittent pedal action
while driving at very slow speeds.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), and Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC). All of these systems work
together to enhance vehicle stability and control in vari-
ous driving conditions.
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake System
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sen-
sation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This
is normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.
The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at approximately
12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the
brake pedal while this test is occurring, you may feel a
slight pedal movement. The movement can be more
apparent on ice and snow and be considered normal.
The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph
(20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
CAUTION!
The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible
detrimental effects of electronic interference caused
by improperly installed aftermarket radios or tele-
phones.
WARNING!
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains so-
phisticated electronic equipment that may be sus-
ceptible to interference caused by improperly in-
stalled or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
WARNING! (Continued)
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, that could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type as the original equipment and the tires must be
properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the
computer.
WARNING!
Significant over or underinflation of tires, or mixing
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss
of braking effectiveness.
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn
on and stay on briefly as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on. If the light does not
turn on during starting, have it repaired
promptly.
This light also illuminates at vehicle start-up to indicate
that the ABS self-check is in process. If the light remains
on after start-up, or turns on and remains on at road
speeds, it may indicate a system malfunction or that the
system is inoperative. In this case, the system reverts to
standard non-anti-lock brakes. If this occurs, safely bring
the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible and
cycle the ignition to attempt to reset the ABS. If the light
remains on, see your authorized dealer immediately to
have the system serviced. Also, if the “BRAKE Warning
Light” and the “ABS Warning Light” are on, and the
parking brake is fully released, see your authorized
dealer immediately.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS system monitors the amount of wheel spin of
each driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability.
Electronic Stability Control
In full on mode the TCS system enhances directional
control and stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. The ESC corrects for oversteering and under-
steering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appro-
priate wheel. Engine power may also be reduced to assist
in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer
and help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
In full on mode ESC utilizes sensors in the vehicle to
determine the path that the driver intends to steer the
vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the intended path,
the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or
understeer.
• Oversteer – when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer – when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
all accidents, including those resulting from exces-
sive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Operating
Modes
The ESC system may have five available operating
modes:
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC system.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in
this mode. The ESC On mode should be used for most
driving situations. The ESC should only be turned OFF
for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
ESC Full Off
The ESC Off mode is intended for off-highway or off-
road use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. In this mode, all TCS and ESC stability fea-
tures are turned OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push
and hold the “ESC” switch for five seconds while the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five
seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC OFF” telltale will
illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message will display in
the vehicle cluster (left of the odometer). The “ESC OFF”
message may appear in the Driver Information Display
(DID). Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in
ESC Button
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation. To turn ESC ON again, momentarily push the
“ESC” switch.
WARNING!
With the ESC switched OFF, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. The “Full
Off” ESC mode is intended for off-highway or off-
road only.
Sport Mode — If Equipped
Sport mode has reduced traction control and reduced
stability control. To enter the “Sport Mode” mode, push
the “ESC” switch once (located on the steering wheel).
The “ESC OFF” telltale will illuminate, and the “ESC
SPORT” message will display in the vehicle cluster (left
of the odometer). Refer to “Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
WARNING!
When in Sport Mode, the TCS functionality of ESC,
(except for the limited slip feature described in the
TCS section), has been disabled, the “ESC Sport
Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC SPORT” mes-
sage will display in the vehicle cluster. When in
Sport Mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Track Mode — If Equipped
Track Mode has no traction control and has reduced
stability control. To enter the “Track Mode” mode, push
the “ESC” switch twice. The “ESC OFF” telltale will
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
illuminate, and the “ESC TRACK” message will display
in the vehicle cluster (left of the odometer). Refer to
“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
When in Track Mode, the TCS functionality of ESC,
(except for the limited slip feature described in the
TCS section), has been disabled, the “ESC Track
Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC TRACK” mes-
sage will display in the vehicle cluster. When in
Track Mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is greatly reduced. Track
Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road only.
Rain Mode
Rain mode offers increased traction control and stability
control for low traction conditions such as wet roads, dry
roads during cold temperatures, or when the driver
wants enhanced stability due to lack of familiarity or
experience with the vehicle’s response. To enter the “Rain
Mode” mode, push the “ESC” switch three times. The
“ESC Rain Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC RAIN”
message will display in the vehicle cluster (left of the
odometer). Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE: Some models may not offer “Sport” or “Track”
Mode.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-
tion of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Con-
sult this manual to determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
There are no snow tires that are compatible with the
wheels on this vehicle.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices
are not recommended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance interval. Remember, more frequent rotation
is permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything caus-
ing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire
rotation.
NOTE: Each wheel on your vehicle contains a tire pres-
sure sensor. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
learns the location of each sensor though system pro-
gramming. Although not required, the manufacturer
recommends reprogramming the TPMS after rotating the
tires so that the system can relearn each sensor’s location.
See your authorized dealer for system reprogramming.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
The front and rear tires are different sizes and cannot be
used in place of each other. Rotate the tires “side-to-side”
as shown in the diagram.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module. It is particularly impor-
tant for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on
your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pres-
sure. The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Driver
Information Display (DID)
• TPM Telltale Light
Tire Rotation
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7.0 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-
minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to urn ON the TPM
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPMS sensor.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module. It is particularly impor-
tant for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on
your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pres-
sure. The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
• Various TPMS messages which display in the Driver
Information Display (DID)
• TPM Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the Driver Information Display (DID)
will display a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message and a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values changing color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ mes-
sage will also be displayed.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
in a different color in the DID graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as
shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the graphic display in the DID will
change color back to the original color, and the TPM
Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
Driver Information Display (DID) will display a ⬙SER-
VICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The DID will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message is then followed with a graphic display with
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres-
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Gulf Coast Countries (GCC)
TPMS
TRA
REGISTERED No: ER0097573/12
DEALER No: DA0047074/10
CORAX3
TRA
REGISTERED No: ER37066/15
DEALER No: DA0047074/10
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
8.4L Engine
The 8.4L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations, provide optimal
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded “Premium”
gasoline having a posted octane number of
91 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is required for in this
engine.
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine
is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and may void or
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% ethanol (E-10). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 10% ethanol (E-10).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 10% ethanol (E-10) or gasoline containing methanol
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 10% ethanol (E-10). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-
mance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline con-
tains a higher level of detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recom-
mended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
formance and damage the emissions control sys-
tem.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver’s door map pocket).
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel-
ing.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
emergency refueling with a gas can.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release procedure by following the
proceeding steps.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Locate the carpet access door (on the right side inner
trim panel of the trunk).
Carpet Access Door
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Pull the edge of the access door on the right side inner
trim panel to expose the emergency release cable.
4. Pull the release cable to release the fuel door.
Edge Of Access Door
Release Cable
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
5. Return the release cable to the original position (inside
the inner trim panel) and push the carpet back into the
original position.
Fuel Door Open Carpet Into Original Position
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Manual Transmission
Flat Tow None NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED
On Trailer All OK
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
GROUND CLEARANCE
The front and rear fascias and side sills ride low and
ground clearance is limited.
CAUTION!
Damage to the front and rear fascias and side sills can
occur if you disregard the low ground clearance in
these areas of your vehicle. Pay close attention when
parking to avoid running into parking curbs. Exer-
cise caution when entering or exiting steep drive-
ways, or when pulling off the road onto soft shoul-
ders.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER ...........314
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............314
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................315
▫ Torque Specifications ...................315
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .........317
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage .................317
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .318
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions .........319
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit ........321
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ...........327
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............331
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........332
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
center of the instrument panel above the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
• On the highways — Slow down and use the highest
gear possible.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
• In city traffic — While moving, shift into the highest
gear possible to reduce engine RPM.
314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
107 Ft-Lbs (145 N·m) 1/2” x 20 19 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns
316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the left side of the trunk.
Tire Service Kit Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6)
when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on the bot-
tom side of the Tire Service Kit)
318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4
inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-
ately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as
70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is
empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ment panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure
to follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
ment”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be hurt by the fan.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite
and damage the converter and vehicle. If the ve-
hicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly,
so follow this procedure carefully.
• Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327
NOTE: The battery is located underneath an access
panel inside the rear compartment on the left side of the
vehicle. A remote battery terminal is located in the engine
compartment for jump-starting.
Battery Location
1 — Positive Battery Post
2 — Negative Battery Post
328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach,
but without allowing the vehicles to touch one an-
other.
3. Set the parking brake, place the transmission in NEU-
TRAL, and turn the ignition OFF on both vehicles.
4. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal loads.
5. Remove the plastic fuse cover to gain access to the
remote jump-start positive (+) post in the engine
compartment. Refer to the following illustration for
remote jump-starting connections.
Remote Jump Start Connections
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
6. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
7. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
8. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
9. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
10. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
11. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between 1st gear
and REVERSE, while gently pushing the accelerator. Use
the least amount of pressure to maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing the
engine.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween 1st gear and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck. And do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Only use flatbed
equipment. Always comply with applicable state or local
towing ordinances.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 8.4L ..........335
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .336
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ........................336
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................337
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................339
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................339
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........340
▫ Engine Oil ..........................341
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................342
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................343
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............344
▫ Hibernation Mode ....................345
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............346
▫ Body Lubrication .....................348
▫ Wiper Blades ........................348
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................349
▫ Exhaust System ......................349
▫ Cooling System ......................352
7
▫ Brake System ........................358
▫ Manual Transmission ..................360
▫ Hydraulic Clutch .....................361
▫ Rear Axle ...........................361
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................362
䡵 FUSES ..............................370
▫ Power Distribution Center ...............371
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................379
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................382
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................383
▫ Front Headlamp, Front Park/Turn Signal
Lamp ..............................383
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp ............383
▫ Taillamp, Tail/Stop Lamp................383
▫ Rear Turn Signal Lamp .................383
▫ Backup Lamps........................383
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................384
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................385
▫ Engine .............................385
▫ Chassis ............................387
334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 8.4L
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 — Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir
2 — Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
4 — Power Distribution Center 9 — Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
To meet new government regulations and promote
cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system
monitors the performance of the emissions and engine
control systems. When these systems are operating prop-
erly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and
fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light. It will also
store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the light on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any state emissions
tests can be performed.
If the light is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices — If
Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 Radio” and “Uconnect
CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your
Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Own-
er’s Manual on the DVD.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339
WARNING! (Continued)
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-
tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the oil level is approximately five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground also
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Add
oil only when the level is below the SAFE mark.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633.
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
0W-40 or equivalent engine oil.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
Use MOPAR SAE 0W-40 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-12633 such as Pennzoil Ultra
equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-
tures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
CAUTION!
Some aftermarket air cleaners and filters can cause
mass air flow sensor issues which can lead to a
driveability problem or a limp home condition.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is vented, and
must be replaced with a vented battery.
The battery is located underneath an access panel inside
the rear compartment on the left side of the vehicle. A
remote battery terminal is located in the engine compart-
ment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting Proce-
dures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
To gain access to the battery, remove the floor portion of
the rear compartment carpet.
Battery Location
1 — Positive Battery Post
2 — Negative Battery Post
344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Hibernation Mode
The Hibernation mode feature conserves battery power
when storing the vehicle. It allows for up to three months
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345
of storage time without losing radio and engine control-
ler adaptive memory. Using this feature is an alternative
to disconnecting the battery.
NOTE: This vehicle is designed to sit in storage with a
fully charged battery for up to 30 days. If you plan to
store the vehicle longer than 30 days, we recommend
doing one of the following:
• Disconnect the battery.
• Use the battery charger.
• Put the vehicle into Hibernation mode (3-month
charge).
To Activate Hibernation Mode
1. Cycle the ignition switch to (ACC).
2. Select Hibernation mode within the Driver Informa-
tion Display (DID).
3. Push the right arrow button on the steering wheel
controls for one second. Vehicle will countdown from
ten seconds and enter Hibernation Mode.
NOTE: You may push the right arrow button on the
steering wheel controls during the countdown to abort
Hibernation Mode.
To Deactivate Hibernation Mode
1. Push the RKE UNLOCK button to unlock the vehicle.
2. Push the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are
not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid
damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of
the vehicle. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant (anti-
freeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush
out the residual water.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at any time the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
condenser/radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser/radiator.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353
CAUTION! (Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-
terial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized
dealer for assistance.
354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to insure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355
WARNING! (Continued)
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
Brake System
To ensure brake system performance, all brake system
components should be inspected periodically. Refer to
“Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
ure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser-
voir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused
by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Use
of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling
point or unidentified as to specification, may result in
sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359
WARNING! (Continued)
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in an accident.
Change Brake Fluid
Brake fluid will tend to absorb moisture from the atmo-
sphere over time. If the fluid becomes contaminated with
water, brake performance will deteriorate. Therefore, the
brake fluid must be changed at the intervals specified in
the “Maintenance Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance
Schedule” for further information. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Manual Transmission
Transmission Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid in the transmission when performing
other underbody services.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug located on
the left side of the transmission. The fluid level should be
approximately 1/4 in (6.4 mm) below the bottom of the
fill hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: DO NOT overfill transmission, damage can
occur.
360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or damage to the
transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifica-
tions.
Change Transmission Fluid
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. If contaminated with water, change the
fluid immediately. See your authorized dealer for service.
Hydraulic Clutch
Master Cylinder — Clutch Fluid Level Check
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Flu-
ids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Axle
Axle Lubricant Level Check
Check the exterior of the axle for evidence of gear oil
leakage every 12 months or 6,000 miles (10 000 km). This
check should be made with the vehicle level and on the
ground or raised on an axle and wheel type hoist. The
axle lubricant level should be between the bottom of the
filler plug and a point approximately 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)
below the filler plug. If adding axle lubricant, use only
the manufacturer’s recommended axle lubricant. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361
CAUTION!
Using axle fluid other than the manufactured recom-
mended fluid may cause a shudder/noise issue. refer
to “Fluids, Lubes, And Genuine Parts” in “ Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Change Axle Lubricant
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. Change the lubricant immediately if
contaminated with water. See your authorized dealer for
service.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint
and decals.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Leather Or Vinyl Seat/Trim Care And Cleaning
Leather is best preserved by regular cleaning with a
damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an
abrasive and damage the leather surface and should be
removed immediately with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils
can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total
Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking the leather with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean the leather. Application
of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the
original condition.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367
WARNING! (Continued)
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
Aero Group (Front Splitter) — If Equipped
The front splitter will not flex or compress against
impacts from the front. If an impact does occur, have the
splitter inspected. A cracked or delaminated splitter
should be replaced.
Always leave ample room and be sure to educate anyone
you allow to operate the vehicle.
Front Splitter
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Use care when approaching parking blocks, tall
speed bumps and garage curbs. These surfaces can
damage your splitter and fascia.
Use caution when driving up to sloped surfaces or over
speed bumps. Approaching a speed bump or a slope at a
slight angle may improve your clearance.
CAUTION!
• Hard contact with steep ramps may cause damage
to your splitter and fascia.
• Replace rub strips when they are worn down to 1/8
inch (3 mm) on the front edge. This will avoid
damage to the carbon fiber panel.
Refer to the ACR Owner’s Manual Supplement for
information specific to the ACR.
Rear Wing — If Equipped
Do not operate the vehicle with the rear wing removed.
The aerodynamic balance of this set up is unstable and
can cause a loss of control.
Rear Wing
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
Water may drain slowly from the ends of the wing after
washing or exposure to rain, this is normal. Opening the
liftgate will expedite drainage.
WARNING!
Use extra caution when closing the rear deck lid on a
vehicle equipped with a rear wing. Due to the added
weight of the rear wing the deck lid will close at a
higher rate of speed and can cause injury.
Carbon Fiber — If Equipped
The clear coated carbon fiber panels will have some
variation and minor waviness in the woven pattern. This
is inherent to the process and a sign of its authenticity.
All carbon fiber materials are susceptible to UV degra-
dation during long exposure to the sun. The woven
carbon components use the latest technology in the resin
system and the clear coat. As with any automotive
coating, storing your vehicle in a covered location will
guarantee a long lasting finish.
The rear wing is molded with unidirectional carbon fiber
and painted in body color. Some patterned or linear
conditions may be visible in the painted carbon fiber
surfaces. This is also a normal result of the carbon fiber
process.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
(Continued)
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
age.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This
center contains fuses and relays.
Power Distribution Center
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
3 — 40 Amp
Green
— Rad Fan
4 — 40 Amp
Green
— Rad Fan Rly High
5 — 40 Amp
Green
— ABS/ESP Pump Feed
6 — 40 Amp
Green
— Starter
7 — 40 Amp
Green
— CBC (Ext. Lighting #1)
8 — 40 Amp
Green
— CBC (Ext. Lighting #2)
9 — 30 Amp Pink — CBC (Lighting, Washer Pump)
10 — 30 Amp Pink — CBC (Power Lock)
11 — Jumper Black — B+ Jumper
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
12 — 25 Amp
Clear
— ABS/ESP Valve Feed
13 — — 20 Amp Yel-
low
Horn
14 — — 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch
15 — — 10 Amp Red Diagnostic, Fuel Door, Stop Switch
16 — — 15 Amp Blue KIN, RF Hub
17 — — 25 Amp cir-
cuit breaker
Power Seats
18 — 30 Amp Pink — Driver Door Mod
19 — 30 Amp Pink — Passenger Door Mod
20 — 30 Amp Pink — Rear Window Defroster
21 — 20 Amp Blue — Wiper
22 — Jumper Black — B+ Jumper
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
23 — — 15 Amp Blue HVAC MOD, Cluster, ICS-Switch Bank
24 — — 25 Amp
Clear
PCM-Powertrain Control Module
25 — — 25 Amp
Clear
Fuel Pump
26 — — 20 Amp Yel-
low
ASD #1
27 — — 20 Amp Yel-
low
ASD #2
28 — — — Spare
29 — 40 Amp
Green
— HVAC Blower
30 — 20 Amp Yel-
low
— RR Power Outlet, Adj. Pedals, UCI
31 — Jumper Black — B+ Jumper
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
32 — — — Spare
33 — 20 Amp Blue — Run Acc relay
34 — Jumper Black — B+ Jumper
35 — — — Spare
36 — — 10 Amp Red ORC Mod Run
37 — — 15 Amp Blue Cluster, Camera
38 — — 20 Amp Yel-
low
Active Damping Suspension
39 — — 10 Amp Red HVAC Module, In Vehicle Temp, Blower Relay
40 — — — Spare
41 G8VA — — Run/Start
42 G8VA — — Fuel Door
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
43AC (For-
ward
Fuse)
— — 2 Amp Grey SCCM
43BE
(Rearward
Fuse)
— — 10 Amp Red Corax
44AC (For-
ward
Fuse)
— — 10 Amp Red Rear View Mirror, Aux Port Jumper.
44BE
(Rearward
Fuse)
— — 10 Amp Red IBS
45 — — 10 Amp Red PCM-Powertrain Control Module, Fuel Pump Relay.
46 — — 10 Amp Red ESC Module, Stop Lamp Switch
47 — — 10 Amp Red ORC Module, Passenger Seat OCM
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
48 — — 10 Amp Red SCCM
49 — — 25 Amp
Clear
Amplifier
50 HC Micro — — Rad Fan
51 HC Micro — — Rad Fan Relay SER/PAR
52 HC Micro — — Starter Relay
53 HC Micro — — Rear Window Defroster Relay
54 HC Relay — — Rad Fan Relay High
55 HC Micro — — Wiper ON/OFF
56 HC Micro — — Wiper LO/HI
57 G8VA — — Horn Relay
58 G8VA — — A/C Clutch Relay
59 HC Micro — — HVAC Blower
60 HC Micro — — Fuel Pump
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
Cavity Relay Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-Fuse Description
61 G8VA — — Run Relay #1
62 G8VA — — Run Relay #2
63 HC Micro — — ASD #1
64 HC Micro — — ASD #2
65 G8VA — — Run Accy #1, Pop Up, Driver Door Window Switch
66 — — — Spare
NOTE: A 15 Amp fuse for the radio system is located
in-line at the battery positive terminal.
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
(Continued)
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
We recommend that you follow these guidelines for
storing your vehicle for extended periods.
• Fill the fuel tank. This will prevent water condensation
inside the tank. If you plan to store your vehicle more
than two months, add an anti-oxidant fuel stabilizer to
the fuel tank.
• Change the oil to remove any corrosive combustion
related acids in the crankcase.
• Check that the radiator coolant level of protection is to
at least -20°F (-29°C).
• Make sure that all tires are inflated to the optimum
pressure.
• Wash and wax the vehicle to protect the finish.
• Store the vehicle in a dry, well-ventilated location.
• Move the wiper blades away from the windshield.
• Block the wheels. Do not apply the parking brake.
• Cut blocks of plywood about the same size of the tires.
Cover each block with indoor/outdoor carpeting and
place them between the tires and concrete. This will
prevent tire flat spotting.
• For long-term storage, remove the tires and put the
vehicle up on blocks. Stack the tires on plywood and
cover with a tarp to prevent flat spotting.
• If the vehicle will be subjected to freezing tempera-
tures, either remove the battery and store it in a dry,
well ventilated area or connect a trickle charger
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
(1.5 Amp) with automatic shutdown / overcharge
protection to the battery. However, do not leave the
trickle charger hooked up to the battery without being
plugged in to a 110 Volt AC outlet, as this will result in
further drain on the vehicle’s battery. If the vehicle is
not going to be driven in the next three weeks, perform
the battery recharge procedure in the Service Manual.
Then, either disconnect the battery at the negative
terminal or use the “Battery Save Feature” to conserve
battery power. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures/
Battery Save Feature” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
for further information.
• Cover the vehicle whenever possible to prevent acci-
dental damage to the finish.
NOTE: Disconnecting the battery causes the engine con-
trol system to lose memory of some “learned” functions.
After reconnecting the battery, the engine may run rough
until the control module “relearns” these functions. Us-
ing the Battery Save Feature will prevent the engine
controller from loosing its memory.
CAUTION!
Use care when disconnecting the remote positive
cable. It is connected to the battery and can short out
to any metal on the vehicle. Always tape or wrap the
exposed cable end to prevent electrical shorts.
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Check the battery every four to six weeks to ensure that
the voltage is above 12.10 Volts. The voltage will drop
more rapidly in hot temperatures. If battery voltage
drops below 12.10 Volts, follow the battery recharge
procedure in the Service Manual.
NOTE: To help prevent the battery from discharging
during shorter periods of inactivity, perform the follow-
ing:
1. Make sure that the liftgate, hood, doors, windows are
completely closed.
2. Make sure that Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter is operating and that the battery is good.
3. Make sure that the HOOD, LIFTGATE, and DOOR
switches are in adjustment. Perform the quick system
check, which follows:
Use the remote transmitter to set the alarm. If the alarm
SET light comes on and flashes, the system is operating
properly. If not, there is a problem with a switch or the
system. See your authorized dealer for service.
If you plan to store the vehicle longer than 30 days, we
recommend using Hibernation Mode to conserve bat-
tery power. Refer to “Hibernation Mode” in Mainte-
nance Procedures for further information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Message Center Indicators Serviced at Authorized Dealer
Cluster LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Gauge Pack Serviced at Authorized Dealer
Heater Control Serviced at Authorized Dealer
Interior Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Courtesy Foot Well Lights W3W
Cargo Lamp (Coupe Liftgate) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low/High Beam Headlamp HID (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Bulb Number
Front Side Marker Lamp 2821M
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Marker Lamp 2821M
Backup Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Front Headlamp, Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Taillamp, Tail/Stop Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Rear Turn Signal Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Backup Lamps
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 16 Gallons 60.6 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
We recommend you use synthetic SAE 0W-40, API Certified. 11 Quarts 10.4 Liters
Transmission
We recommend you use MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
3.4 Quarts 3.2 Liters
Rear Axle
We recommend you use Castrol SAF-XJ/SAE 75W-140 Synthetic
Gear and Axle Lubricant.
1.5 Quarts 1.4 Liters
Cooling System *
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent).
16 Quarts 15 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032.
Engine Oil We recommend you use a full synthetic 0W-40 engine oil
such as MOPAR or Pennzoil Ultra or equivalent engine
oil.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection We recommend you use Unleaded 91 Octane Only or
Higher, 0-10% Ethanol.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Transmission We recommend you use MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Rear Axle We recommend you use Castrol SAF-XJ/SAE 75W-140
Synthetic Gear and Axle Lubricant.
Brake/Clutch Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR Brake and Clutch
Fluid DOT 4 Motor Vehicle.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid +
4, MOPAR or ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever comes first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
390 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering, and transmission, and
add as needed.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
NOTE: Also, inspect the exhaust system if you notice a
change in the sound of the exhaust system, or if the
exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle.
• Inspect the brake hoses.
• Inspect the suspension components.
• Lubricate door hinges and check springs.
• Check the engine coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
• Check power steering fluid level.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 391
MAINTENANCE CHART
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change the engine oil and
engine oil filter.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Rotate the tires, rotate at the
first sign of irregular wear, even
if it occurs before scheduled
maintenance.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the brake linings; re-
place if necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Inspect the exhaust system. XXXXXXXXXXXX
Change Brake Fluid XXXXXX
Adjust the parking brake on
vehicles equipped with four
wheel disc brakes.
XXXXX
392 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change the engine oil and
engine oil filter.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Change the manual transmis-
sion fluid.
XXXX
Inspect the manual transmis-
sion fluid, add as necessary.
XX XX XX XX
Change the rear axle fluid. XXXXXXXX
Inspect front suspension, tie
rod ends, and boot seals, for
cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper loose-
ness or end play; replace if
necessary.
XXXXXXXXXXXX
Replace the engine air cleaner. XXXXX
Inspect and replace the PCV
Valve if necessary
X
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 393
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change the engine oil and
engine oil filter.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Replace the spark plugs ** X
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 120 months if not
done at 150,000 miles
(240,000 km).
XX
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
monthly intervals do not apply.
394 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 395
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .......................399
▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............399
▫ Prepare A List ........................399
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............399
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............399
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center ............400
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........400
▫ In Mexico Contact .....................401
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................401
▫ Service Contract ......................401
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............402
䡵 MOPARPARTS ........................403
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............403
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. ...............................403
▫ In Canada...........................403
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............404
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 399
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (855) SRT–TEAM
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
400 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 401
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
402 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR PARTS
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 403
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
404 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 405
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
406 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes ........................263
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ................265
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............354
Adding Fuel .............................307
Adding Washer Fluid ......................349
Additives, Fuel ...........................304
Adjust
Forward ..............................103
Rearward .............................103
Adjustable Pedals .........................118
AirBag...............................47, 48
Advance Front Air Bag .................48, 49
Air Bag Operation .......................51
Air Bag Warning Light ....................69
Enhanced Accident Response ................68
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................72
FrontAirBag ........................47, 48
If A Deployment Occurs ...................67
Knee Impact Bolsters .....................64
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............71
Transporting Pets ........................84
Air Bag Deployment ........................47
Air Bag Light .......................69, 88, 153
Air Bag Maintenance .......................71
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .343
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................346
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..............220
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............346, 347
Air Conditioning System ....................346
Air Pressure, Tires.........................284
Alarm (Security Alarm) .....................156
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................18
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............7
Antenna................................212
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............353, 384
Capacities ............................384
Disposal ..............................356
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................265
408 INDEX
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................267
Appearance Care .........................362
Auto Down Power Windows ..................30
Automatic Door Locks ....................28, 29
Automatic Headlights ......................109
Auto Unlock, Doors ........................29
Auto Up Power Windows ....................31
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ........135
Auxiliary Power Outlet .....................135
Battery .............................157, 344
Charging System Light ...................157
Emergency Starting ......................327
Jump Starting ..........................327
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........24
Location ..............................344
Remote Battery Replacement ................24
Saving Feature (Protection) ................345
Storing Vehicle .........................345
Transmitter Battery Replacement .............24
Belts, Seat ...............................88
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................348
B-Pillar Location ..........................278
Brake Control System, Electronic ..............264
Brake, Parking ...........................261
Brake System .........................263, 358
Anti-Lock (ABS) .....................263, 265
Fluid Check ........................358, 387
Master Cylinder ........................358
Warning Light .........................154
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........263
Brightness, Interior Lights ...................113
Bulb Replacement .........................383
Bulbs, Light...........................89, 382
Camera, Rear ............................124
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........384
Capacities, Fluid ..........................384
10
INDEX 409
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ...........................342
Power Steering .........................260
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................355
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................87, 306
Car Washes .............................362
Chains, Tire .............................295
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................273
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .337
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............86
Checks, Safety ............................86
Child Restraint ............................73
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ...........................78
Child Restraints .........................73
Infants And Child Restraints ................76
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt ..................................79
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........76
Using The Top Tether Anchorage .............82
Clean Air Gasoline ........................303
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................363
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................348
Climate Control ..........................212
Clutch Fluid .............................361
Compact Spare Tire ........................289
Contract, Service ..........................401
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........355
Cooling System...........................352
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............354
Coolant Capacity .......................384
Coolant Level ......................352, 356
Disposal Of Used Coolant .................356
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...................353
Inspection ............................356
Points To Remember .....................357
Pressure Cap ..........................355
410 INDEX
Radiator Cap ..........................355
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......353, 384, 385
Corrosion Protection .......................362
Cruise Light .............................172
Cupholders .............................139
Customer Assistance .......................399
Data Recorder, Event .......................72
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights.............114
Daytime Running Lights ....................110
Dealer Service............................339
Defroster, Rear Window.....................143
Defroster, Windshield .......................88
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..................114
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................336
Dimmer Switch, Headlight...................112
Dipsticks
Power Steering .........................260
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................356
Door Ajar...............................161
Door Ajar Light ..........................161
Door Locks ..............................26
Key Fob Emergency Key ...................24
Door Locks, Automatic ......................28
Door Opener, Garage.......................126
Doors ..................................26
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water ................................257
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet)........135
Electric Remote Mirrors......................98
Electronic Brake Control System ...............264
Traction Control System ...................267
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........120
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............267
10
INDEX 411
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........159
Emergency Brake .........................261
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ................331
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................314
Jump Starting ..........................327
Overheating ...........................314
Towing ..............................332
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........337
Engine .................................335
Air Cleaner ...........................343
Checking Oil Level ......................341
Compartment ..........................335
Coolant (Antifreeze) ..................352, 385
Cooling ..............................352
Exhaust Gas Caution ..................87, 306
Fails To Start ..........................246
Flooded, Starting .......................246
Fuel Requirements ...................302, 384
Oil ...........................341, 384, 385
Oil Change Interval ......................341
Oil Filler Cap ..........................342
Oil Filter .............................342
Oil Selection .......................341, 384
Overheating ...........................314
Engine Oil Viscosity ....................342, 384
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............68
Ethanol ................................303
Event Data Recorder ........................72
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................87, 306
Exhaust System ........................87, 349
Exterior Lighting..........................108
Exterior Lights ............................89
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................343
Engine Oil .........................342, 385
Engine Oil Disposal .....................342
412 INDEX
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................314
Turn Signal ......................89, 111, 171
Flash-To-Pass ............................112
Flooded Engine Starting ....................246
Fluid Capacities ..........................384
Fluid Leaks ..............................89
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ............................358, 387
Capacities ............................384
Clutch Fluid ...........................361
Cooling System .........................352
Engine Oil ............................341
Manual Transmission .................360, 387
Power Steering ......................260, 387
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ...........385
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...................314
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................331
Fuel...................................302
Additives .............................304
Clean Air .............................303
Ethanol ..............................303
Gasoline ..............................302
Light ................................169
Materials Added ........................304
Methanol .............................303
Octane Rating ......................302, 385
Requirements .......................302, 384
Tank Capacity ..........................384
Fuses ..................................370
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ..........126, 133
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................303
Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................302
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................303
General Information .......................212
Glass Cleaning ...........................366
10
INDEX 413
Ground Clearance .........................312
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Stand-
ing Water .............................257
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................314
Headlights
Automatic ............................109
Delay ................................109
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........112
Lights On Reminder .....................110
On With Wipers .....................109, 117
Passing ..............................112
Switch ...............................108
Time Delay ............................109
Head Restraints ..........................105
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch ....112
Holder, Cup .............................139
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)..............126
Hood Release ............................105
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid .....................361
Illuminated Entry ..........................20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................15
Inside Rearview Mirror ......................94
Instrument Cluster ..............149, 156, 160, 171
Instrument Panel And Controls ...............148
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............367
Interior Appearance Care....................365
Interior Lights............................112
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............114
Introduction ..............................4
Jump Starting ............................327
KeyFob.................................11
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........17
Programming Additional Transmitters .........17
414 INDEX
Remote Battery Replacement ................24
Key-In Reminder ..........................13
Keyless Entry System .....................11,21
Keyless Go...............................11
Key, Replacement ..........................16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................15
Lane Change And Turn Signals................111
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................37
Latches .................................89
Hood ................................105
Lead Free Gasoline ........................302
Leaks, Fluid ..............................89
Life Of Tires .............................292
Liftgate .................................32
Light Bulbs ..............................89
Lights ...............................89, 108
AirBag .........................69, 88, 153
Anti-Lock .............................267
Automatic Headlights ....................109
Brake Warning .........................154
Bulb Replacement ....................382, 383
Cruise ...............................172
Daytime Running .......................110
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .............111,112
Engine Temperature Warning ...............156
Exterior ...............................89
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................314
Headlights ............................108
Headlights On Reminder ..................110
Headlights On With Wipers .............109, 117
Headlight Switch .......................108
High Beam ............................112
High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............112
Illuminated Entry ........................20
Instrument Cluster ......................108
Intensity Control ........................113
Interior ..............................112
10
INDEX 415
Lights On Reminder .....................110
Low Fuel .............................169
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........162
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ...........114
Park ................................170
Passing ..............................112
Seat Belt Reminder ......................152
Security Alarm .........................156
Service ...........................382, 383
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .........166, 296
Turn Signal ......................89, 111, 171
Vanity Mirror ...........................99
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .156, 171
Loading Vehicle
Tires ................................278
Locks ..................................26
Automatic Door .........................28
Auto Unlock ...........................29
Door .................................26
Power Door ............................27
Low Tire Indicator ........................296
Low Tire Pressure System ...................296
Lubrication, Body .........................348
Lug Nuts ...............................315
Maintenance Free Battery....................344
Maintenance Procedures ....................340
Maintenance Schedule ...............389, 390, 392
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .162, 337
Manual, Service ..........................404
Manual Transmission ...................247, 361
Fluid Level Check ...................360, 387
Lubricant Selection ......................387
Shift Speeds ...........................250
Methanol ...............................303
Mirrors .................................94
Electric Remote .........................98
Outside ...............................98
416 INDEX
Rearview ..............................94
Vanity ................................99
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................296
MOPAR Parts.........................339, 403
MTBE/ETBE ............................303
Multi-Function Control Lever .................111
Occupant Restraints ........................34
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................302
Oil, Engine .......................341, 384, 385
Capacity .............................384
Change Interval ........................341
Checking .............................341
Dipstick ..............................341
Disposal ..............................342
Filter .............................342, 385
Filter Disposal .........................342
Materials Added To ......................342
Pressure Warning Light ...................158
Recommendation ....................341, 384
Viscosity ..........................342, 384
Oil Filter, Change .........................342
Oil Filter, Selection ........................343
Oil Pressure Light .........................158
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................336
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) .............126
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ....................98
Overheating, Engine .......................314
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........4,404
Paint Care ..............................362
Panic Alarm ..............................23
Parking Brake............................261
Parking On Hill ..........................261
Passing Light ............................112
Pedals, Adjustable .........................118
10
INDEX 417
Pets....................................84
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..........279
Power
Brakes ...............................263
Door Locks ............................27
Mirrors ...............................98
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........135
Steering ...........................259, 260
Windows ..............................29
Power Seats
Forward ..............................103
Rearward .............................103
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............44
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................44
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .24
Radial Ply Tires ..........................286
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........355
Radio Antenna ...........................212
Radio Frequency
General Information .................15, 17, 25
Radio Operation ..........................212
Radio (Sound Systems) .....................209
Rear Camera ............................124
Rear Liftgate .............................32
Rear Window Defroster .....................143
Rear Window Features .....................143
Reclining Front Seats .......................102
Recorder, Event Data .......................72
Recreational Towing .......................311
Reformulated Gasoline .....................303
Refrigerant ..............................347
Reminder, Lights On .......................110
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................36
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..................21
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........17
Programming Additional Transmitters .........17
418 INDEX
Remote Battery Replacement ................24
Transmitter Battery Replacement .............24
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........210
Replacement Keys .........................16
Replacement Parts.........................339
Replacement Tires .........................293
Reporting Safety Defects ....................403
Restraint, Head...........................105
Restraints, Child...........................73
Restraints, Occupant ........................34
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck .................331
Rotation, Tires ...........................295
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..................88
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................89
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................403
Safety, Exhaust Gas.........................87
Safety Information, Tire .....................272
Safety Tips ...............................86
Schedule, Maintenance ..................389, 390
Seat Belt
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........45
Energy Management Feature ................45
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................40
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................37
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............42
Pregnant Women ........................44
Seat Belt Extender .......................43
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................44
Seat Belt Reminder .......................36
Seat Belt System .........................34
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................367
Seat Belt Reminder .........................36
Seat Belts .............................35, 88
Child Restraint ..........................73
Extender ..............................43
Front Seat ........................35, 37, 40
Inspection .............................88
10
INDEX 419
Operating Instructions ....................40
Pregnant Women ........................44
Pretensioners ...........................44
Rear Seat ..............................37
Reminder .............................152
Untwisting Procedure .....................42
Seats ...............................100, 103
Adjustment ........................100, 103
Reclining .............................102
Security Alarm.........................18, 156
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............385
Selection Of Oil ..........................341
SENTRY KEY
Key Programming .......................17
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................15
Sentry Key Replacement .....................16
Service Assistance .........................399
Service Contract ..........................401
Service Manuals ..........................404
Shift Indicator Light .......................250
Shift Speeds ..........................247, 250
Shoulder Belts ............................37
Signals, Turn .......................89, 111, 171
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................295
Spare Tire ........................288, 289, 290
Spark Plugs .............................385
Speed Control
Resume ..............................122
Speed Control (Cruise Control)................120
Starting ................................244
Emergency (Jump Starting) ................327
Engine Fails To Start .....................246
Starting And Operating .....................244
Starting Procedures ........................244
Steering
Column Controls ........................111
Power ............................259, 260
Tilt Column ...........................117
420 INDEX
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............210
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .210
Storage ................................379
Storage, Vehicle...........................219
Stuck, Freeing............................331
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag .........48
Tilt Steering Column .......................117
Time Delay, Headlight ......................109
Tire And Loading Information Placard .......278, 279
Tire Markings ............................272
Tires......................89, 283, 288, 289, 405
Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................292
Air Pressure ...........................283
Chains ...............................295
Compact Spare .........................289
General Information ...............283, 288, 289
High Speed ...........................286
Inflation Pressures .......................284
Life Of Tires ...........................292
Load Capacity ......................278, 279
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............296
Pressure Warning Light ...................166
Quality Grading ........................405
Radial ...............................286
Replacement ...........................293
Rotation ..............................295
Safety ............................272, 283
Sizes ................................273
Spare Tire ......................288, 289, 290
Spinning .............................291
Tread Wear Indicators ....................291
Tire Safety Information .....................272
Tire Service Kit .......317, 318, 319, 321, 322, 325, 326
Towing .............................311,332
Disabled Vehicle ........................332
Recreational ...........................311
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ...........311
10
INDEX 421
Traction ................................256
Traction Control ..........................267
Trailer Towing ...........................311
Transmission ............................360
Fluid ................................387
Shifting ...........................247, 250
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .24
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .24
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .........21
Transporting Pets ..........................84
Tread Wear Indicators ......................291
Turn Signals ..........................111,171
Uconnect
Operation .............................209
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition
Additional Information ...................240
Do Not Disturb ........................238
Siri Eyes Free ..........................238
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert .....................232
Uconnect Settings ..........................29
Uconnect Voice Command ...................221
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................405
Universal Transmitter ......................126
Unleaded Gasoline ........................302
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................42
Upholstery Care ..........................366
Vanity Mirrors ............................99
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............6
Vehicle Loading ..........................279
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........18
Vehicle Storage........................219, 379
Vinyl Trim ..............................366
Viscosity, Engine Oil ....................342, 384
422 INDEX
Voice Recognition System (VR) ................221
Warning Flasher, Hazard ....................314
Warnings And Cautions ......................6
Warranty Information ......................402
Washer
Adding Fluid ..........................349
Washers, Windshield....................116,349
Washing Vehicle ..........................362
Water
Driving Through ........................257
Wheel And Wheel Trim .....................363
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................363
Window Fogging .........................219
Windows ................................29
Power ................................29
Reset Auto-Up ..........................31
Windshield Defroster .......................88
Windshield Washers .................114,116,349
Windshield Wiper Blades....................348
Windshield Wipers ........................114
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................348
Wipers, Intermittent .......................114
10
INDEX 423
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Viper
OWNER’S MANUAL
2016
2016 Viper
Third Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
16ZD-126-AC
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
